1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
131+ Garage Configurations In Stock | Free Install on All Tubular Steel Orders

Metal Garages & Steel Garage Kits For Sale

Fully enclosed prefabricated steel garages with free delivery and professional installation in all 48 contiguous states. Standard, triple-wide and lean-to configurations. 12 or 14 gauge galvanized frames with a 20-year rust-through warranty.

$6,775
Starting Price
48
States Served
20yr
12-GA Warranty
$0
Install Fee
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1281–1320 of 2342 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Navy steel building pool house with white trim and sliding glass doors beside an inground pool

10×10 Pool Equipment House

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Pool Equipment House | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Pool Equipment House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Pool Equipment House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Pool Equipment House, built for daily backyard use.

Small property owners with above-ground pools use this for the pump, filter, chemicals, and floats. Vented gable ends keep chlorine fumes from condensing on steel. Locked roll-up door keeps kids out of the chemical.

You’re viewing:Pool Equipment House·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Vented Gables
  • Lockable
  • Galvalume Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-POOL-EQUIPMENT-HBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 pool equipment house.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Small property owners with above-ground pools use this for the pump, filter, chemicals, and floats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Pool Equipment House layout.

Small property owners with above-ground pools use this for the pump, filter, chemicals, and floats. Vented gable ends keep chlorine fumes from condensing on steel. Locked roll-up door keeps kids out of the chemical shelf.

💡 Pro tip:Pool Equipment House works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Pool Equipment House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool Equipment House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool Equipment House spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool Equipment House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool equipment house
Everyday pool equipment house
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool equipment house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool equipment house + seasonal storage
pool equipment house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Pool Equipment House, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 pool equipment house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool Equipment House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Pool Equipment House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Pool Equipment House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool Equipment House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool Equipment House also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool Equipment House questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 pool equipment house cost?

A 10×10 pool equipment house from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 pool equipment house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool equipment house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 pool equipment house?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool equipment house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 pool equipment house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 pool equipment house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 pool equipment house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 pool equipment house.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 pool equipment house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 pool equipment house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×10 pool equipment house add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×10 pool equipment house typically adds $800–$1,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool Equipment House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy steel building pool house with white trim and sliding glass doors beside an inground pool

10×10 Pool Equipment House

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal building kit with green trim, single slope roof and SUV in lit studio bay

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10She-Shed / Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room, built for hobby and recreational use.

Hobbyists doing pottery, sewing, or scrapbooking get a dedicated 10×10 building with a craft table, supply shelving, and natural light from two windows. Wainscoting in a contrasting color and a Barn Red roof reads more.

You’re viewing:She-Shed / Hobby Room·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Two Windows
  • Painted Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-SHE-SHED-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 she-shed / hobby room.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Hobbyists doing pottery, sewing, or scrapbooking get a dedicated 10×10 building with a craft table, supply shelving, and natural light from two windows.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑10′ × 10′ · 100 ground + loft

She-Shed / Hobby Room layout.

Hobbyists doing pottery, sewing, or scrapbooking get a dedicated 10×10 building with a craft table, supply shelving, and natural light from two windows. Wainscoting in a contrasting color and a Barn Red roof reads more cottage than utility.

💡 Pro tip:She-Shed / Hobby Room works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She-Shed / Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She-Shed / Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She-Shed / Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday she-shed / hobby room
Everyday she-shed / hobby room
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she-shed / hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe-shed / hobby room + seasonal storage
she-shed / hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 she-shed / hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She-Shed / Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She-Shed / Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She-Shed / Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She-Shed / Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room cost?

A 10×10 she-shed / hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 she-shed / hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she-shed / hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she-shed / hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 she-shed / hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 she-shed / hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 10×10 she-shed / hobby room for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a she-shed / hobby room to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your She-Shed / Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal building kit with green trim, single slope roof and SUV in lit studio bay

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green single-slope steel structure built as an open-sided loafing shelter with cream posts

10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Chicken Coop Shelter

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter, built for farm and ranch demands.

Backyard chicken keepers run a 10×10 coop for 8-12 hens with roosting bars on the back wall, nesting boxes, and a 36" walk-in door for cleaning. Steel won’t rot from droppings and water like a wood coop will after two.

You’re viewing:Chicken Coop Shelter·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$2,150
10×12
longer
$2,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Walk-In Door
  • Vented Eaves
  • Mobile-Home Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-CHICKEN-COOP-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 chicken coop shelter.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Backyard chicken keepers run a 10×10 coop for 8-12 hens with roosting bars on the back wall, nesting boxes, and a 36" walk-in door for cleaning.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Chicken Coop Shelter layout.

Backyard chicken keepers run a 10×10 coop for 8-12 hens with roosting bars on the back wall, nesting boxes, and a 36" walk-in door for cleaning. Steel won’t rot from droppings and water like a wood coop will after two seasons.

💡 Pro tip:Chicken Coop Shelter works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Chicken Coop Shelter.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Chicken Coop Shelter spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Chicken Coop Shelter.

DAILY USEEveryday chicken coop shelter
Everyday chicken coop shelter
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a chicken coop shelter.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchicken coop shelter + seasonal storage
chicken coop shelter + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 chicken coop shelter is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Chicken Coop Shelter shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Chicken Coop Shelter · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Chicken Coop Shelter also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Chicken Coop Shelter questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 chicken coop shelter cost?

A 10×10 chicken coop shelter from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 chicken coop shelter price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud chicken coop shelter ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 chicken coop shelter?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud chicken coop shelter different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 chicken coop shelter need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 chicken coop shelter delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 chicken coop shelter without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 10×10 chicken coop shelter.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 chicken coop shelter?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 chicken coop shelter in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×10 chicken coop shelter stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Chicken Coop Shelter quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green single-slope steel structure built as an open-sided loafing shelter with cream posts

10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel garage at dusk with black roll-up door as a rider walks his Harley

10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Lawn Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Riding mower, push mower, trimmer, blower, gas cans, and a fertilizer spreader all fit with a 10×10 roll-up door for drive-in access. Concrete pad keeps tires clean; ground anchor option works if you’re saving the slab.

You’re viewing:Lawn Equipment Storage·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Ground Anchors
  • 29 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-LAWN-EQUIPMENT-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 lawn equipment storage.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Riding mower, push mower, trimmer, blower, gas cans, and a fertilizer spreader all fit with a 10×10 roll-up door for drive-in access.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft shop

Lawn Equipment Storage layout.

Riding mower, push mower, trimmer, blower, gas cans, and a fertilizer spreader all fit with a 10×10 roll-up door for drive-in access. Concrete pad keeps tires clean; ground anchor option works if you’re saving the slab pour for next year.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn Equipment Storage works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn equipment storage
Everyday lawn equipment storage
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 lawn equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 lawn equipment storage cost?

A 10×10 lawn equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 lawn equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 lawn equipment storage?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 lawn equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 lawn equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 lawn equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 lawn equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 lawn equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 lawn equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×10 lawn equipment storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×10 lawn equipment storage typically adds $800–$1,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel garage at dusk with black roll-up door as a rider walks his Harley

10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray steel building with black roll-up door and orange Kubota tractor on a gravel pad

10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage | Steel and Stud, From $3,350

12

10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,800$3,350SAVE $450
or $70/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Job-Site Tool Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Contractors buy a 10×10 steel building kit for on-site tool security between phases of a long build. Heavy-duty slide bolt, deadbolt, and a Knox box option lock down generators, compressors, and copper. Disassembles for.

You’re viewing:Job-Site Tool Storage·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,350$3,800Save $450
or as low as $70/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$3,350
10×12
longer
$3,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Deadbolt
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Re-Locatable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-JOB-SITE-TOOL-STBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 job-site tool storage.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Contractors buy a 10×10 steel building kit for on-site tool security between phases of a long build.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Job-Site Tool Storage layout.

Contractors buy a 10×10 steel building kit for on-site tool security between phases of a long build. Heavy-duty slide bolt, deadbolt, and a Knox box option lock down generators, compressors, and copper. Disassembles for the next job.

💡 Pro tip:Job-Site Tool Storage works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Job-Site Tool Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Job-Site Tool Storage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Job-Site Tool Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday job-site tool storage
Everyday job-site tool storage
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a job-site tool storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWjob-site tool storage + seasonal storage
job-site tool storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$70/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 job-site tool storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $70/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Job-Site Tool Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Job-Site Tool Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Job-Site Tool Storage also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Job-Site Tool Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 job-site tool storage cost?

A 10×10 job-site tool storage from Steel and Stud starts at $3,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $70/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 job-site tool storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud job-site tool storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 job-site tool storage?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud job-site tool storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 job-site tool storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 job-site tool storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 job-site tool storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $70/month on a 10×10 job-site tool storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 job-site tool storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 job-site tool storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 10×10 job-site tool storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Job-Site Tool Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray steel building with black roll-up door and orange Kubota tractor on a gravel pad

10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Woodgrain metal carport with black frame sheltering a pickup truck and SUV

10×10 Feed & Hay Storage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Feed & Hay Storage | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

10×10 Feed & Hay Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Feed & Hay Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Feed & Hay Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Small property owners with goats, horses, or backyard livestock store 30-40 bales of hay plus feed bins under a sealed steel roof. Vapor-barrier insulation keeps moisture off the bales. Sliding barn door reads.

You’re viewing:Feed & Hay Storage·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$2,150
10×12
longer
$2,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • Vapor Barrier
  • Vented Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-FEED-HAY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 feed & hay storage.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Small property owners with goats, horses, or backyard livestock store 30-40 bales of hay plus feed bins under a sealed steel roof.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Feed & Hay Storage layout.

Small property owners with goats, horses, or backyard livestock store 30-40 bales of hay plus feed bins under a sealed steel roof. Vapor-barrier insulation keeps moisture off the bales. Sliding barn door reads farm-style and clears bulk loads.

💡 Pro tip:Feed & Hay Storage works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Feed & Hay Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Feed & Hay Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Feed & Hay Storage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Feed & Hay Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday feed & hay storage
Everyday feed & hay storage
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a feed & hay storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfeed & hay storage + seasonal storage
feed & hay storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Feed & Hay Storage, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 feed & hay storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Feed & Hay Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Feed & Hay Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Feed & Hay Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Feed & Hay Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Feed & Hay Storage also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Feed & Hay Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 feed & hay storage cost?

A 10×10 feed & hay storage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 feed & hay storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud feed & hay storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 feed & hay storage?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud feed & hay storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 feed & hay storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 feed & hay storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 feed & hay storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 10×10 feed & hay storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 feed & hay storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 feed & hay storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×10 feed & hay storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Feed & Hay Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Woodgrain metal carport with black frame sheltering a pickup truck and SUV

10×10 Feed & Hay Storage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Khaki metal garage with black roll-up door and wainscot overlooking a calm lake

20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $9,450

12

20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Two-Car Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners outgrowing a single-car shed pick the 20×32 because two F-150s park nose-to-tail with 8 feet of bench space behind them. Spec a 20×32 roll-up plus a 20×32 walk-in for daily access. The 12-foot leg height.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Detached Garage·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,150
20×32
this size
$9,450
20×35
longer
$10,350
24×32
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 two-car detached garage.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Homeowners outgrowing a single-car shed pick the 20×32 because two F-150s park nose-to-tail with 8 feet of bench space behind them.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Two-Car Detached Garage layout.

Homeowners outgrowing a single-car shed pick the 20×32 because two F-150s park nose-to-tail with 8 feet of bench space behind them. Spec a 20×32 roll-up plus a 20×32 walk-in for daily access. The 12-foot leg height clears a lifted truck or roof rack.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Detached Garage works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car detached garage
Everyday two-car detached garage
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car detached garage + seasonal storage
two-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 two-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 two-car detached garage cost?

A 20×32 two-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 two-car detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 two-car detached garage?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 two-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 two-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 two-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 20×32 two-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 two-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 two-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×32 two-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×32 two-car detached garage typically adds $5,120–$7,680 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Khaki metal garage with black roll-up door and wainscot overlooking a calm lake

20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal workshop with black roll-up door and wainscot against a mountain backdrop

20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay | Steel and Stud, From $9,450

12

20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay, built for daily backyard use.

Tradespeople and weekend builders use the back 12 feet for a workbench wall and the front 20 feet for a vehicle pull-in. R-19 batt insulation and a 20×32 window keep it usable year-round. Wire it 100-amp and you’ve got.

You’re viewing:Metal Workshop with Bench Bay·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,150
20×32
this size
$9,450
20×35
longer
$10,350
24×32
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-METAL-WORKSHOP-BBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Tradespeople and weekend builders use the back 12 feet for a workbench wall and the front 20 feet for a vehicle pull-in.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay layout.

Tradespeople and weekend builders use the back 12 feet for a workbench wall and the front 20 feet for a vehicle pull-in. R-19 batt insulation and a 20×32 window keep it usable year-round. Wire it 100-amp and you’ve got a real shop, not a parking garage.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Workshop with Bench Bay works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Workshop with Bench Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Workshop with Bench Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday metal workshop with bench bay
Everyday metal workshop with bench bay
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal workshop with bench bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal workshop with bench bay + seasonal storage
metal workshop with bench bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Workshop with Bench Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Workshop with Bench Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Workshop with Bench Bay also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay cost?

A 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal workshop with bench bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal workshop with bench bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay typically adds $5,120–$7,680 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Workshop with Bench Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal workshop with black roll-up door and wainscot against a mountain backdrop

20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal carport with open rv bay and enclosed utility room with white door

20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover | Steel and Stud, From $9,450

12

20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Single-Bay RV Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners with Class A or fifth-wheel rigs use the 20×32 carport configuration to clear up to 38-foot coaches with side overhang. The 14-foot leg height fits slide-out awnings and rooftop AC units. Open sides keep.

You’re viewing:Single-Bay RV Cover·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,150
20×32
this size
$9,450
20×35
longer
$10,350
24×32
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • 14′ Leg Height
  • Vertical Roof
  • Open Sides
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-SINGLE-BAY-RV-COBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 single-bay rv cover.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. RV owners with Class A or fifth-wheel rigs use the 20×32 carport configuration to clear up to 38-foot coaches with side overhang.

RV BAYDaily Driver20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft · tall walls

Single-Bay RV Cover layout.

RV owners with Class A or fifth-wheel rigs use the 20×32 carport configuration to clear up to 38-foot coaches with side overhang. The 14-foot leg height fits slide-out awnings and rooftop AC units. Open sides keep airflow; add gable ends to block wind-driven rain.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Bay RV Cover works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Bay RV Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Bay RV Cover spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Bay RV Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday single-bay rv cover
Everyday single-bay rv cover
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-bay rv cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-bay rv cover + seasonal storage
single-bay rv cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 single-bay rv cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Bay RV Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Bay RV Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Bay RV Cover also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Bay RV Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 single-bay rv cover cost?

A 20×32 single-bay rv cover from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 single-bay rv cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-bay rv cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 single-bay rv cover?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-bay rv cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 single-bay rv cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 single-bay rv cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 single-bay rv cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 20×32 single-bay rv cover.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 single-bay rv cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 single-bay rv cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×32 single-bay rv cover for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a single-bay rv cover to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Bay RV Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal carport with open rv bay and enclosed utility room with white door

20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal barn with black roof and three stall doors, black horse in the paddock

20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) | Steel and Stud, From $10,100

12

20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,500$10,100SAVE $1,400
or $210/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack), built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers fit two 20×32 stalls plus an 8-foot tack and feed room into a 20×32 metal barn. Sliding barn doors on the gable end give tractor access; Dutch doors on the long wall let horses out to pasture. Wainscoting.

You’re viewing:Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,100$11,500Save $1,400
or as low as $210/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,800
20×32
this size
$10,100
20×35
longer
$11,000
24×32
wider
$12,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Wainscoting
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-HORSE-BARN-2-STABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack).

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Hobby farmers fit two 20×32 stalls plus an 8-foot tack and feed room into a 20×32 metal barn.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) layout.

Hobby farmers fit two 20×32 stalls plus an 8-foot tack and feed room into a 20×32 metal barn. Sliding barn doors on the gable end give tractor access; Dutch doors on the long wall let horses out to pasture. Wainscoting protects lower walls from kicks.

💡 Pro tip:Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack).

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn (2-stall + tack)
Everyday horse barn (2-stall + tack)
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn (2-stall + tack).
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn (2-stall + tack) + seasonal storage
horse barn (2-stall + tack) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack), what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$210/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $210/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) cost?

A 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) from Steel and Stud starts at $10,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $210/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud horse barn (2-stall + tack) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack)?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn (2-stall + tack) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $210/month on a 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack).

What warranty comes with the 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal barn with black roof and three stall doors, black horse in the paddock

20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray metal shed with single-slope roof and open side bays on rolling farmland

20×32 Garage + Storage Combo

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Garage + Storage Combo | Steel and Stud, From $9,450

12

20×32 Garage + Storage Combo
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Garage + Storage Combo

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Garage + Storage Combo, built for daily backyard use.

Suburban homeowners split the 640 sq ft into a 20×32 single-bay garage and a 20×32 partitioned storage room with its own walk-in door. Steel-stud interior partition included. Perfect for households that need a car, lawn.

You’re viewing:Garage + Storage Combo·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,150
20×32
this size
$9,450
20×35
longer
$10,350
24×32
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • Interior Partition
  • 2 Walk-In Doors
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-GARAGE-STORAGE-CBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 garage + storage combo.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Suburban homeowners split the 640 sq ft into a 20×32 single-bay garage and a 20×32 partitioned storage room with its own walk-in door.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Garage + Storage Combo layout.

Suburban homeowners split the 640 sq ft into a 20×32 single-bay garage and a 20×32 partitioned storage room with its own walk-in door. Steel-stud interior partition included. Perfect for households that need a car, lawn gear, and seasonal bins separated.

💡 Pro tip:Garage + Storage Combo works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Garage + Storage Combo in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage + Storage Combo.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage + Storage Combo spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage + Storage Combo.

DAILY USEEveryday garage + storage combo
Everyday garage + storage combo
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage + storage combo.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage + storage combo + seasonal storage
garage + storage combo + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Garage + Storage Combo, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 garage + storage combo is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage + Storage Combo shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Garage + Storage Combo buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Garage + Storage Combo

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage + Storage Combo · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage + Storage Combo also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage + Storage Combo questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 garage + storage combo cost?

A 20×32 garage + storage combo from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 garage + storage combo price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage + storage combo ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 garage + storage combo?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage + storage combo different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 garage + storage combo need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 garage + storage combo delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 garage + storage combo without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 20×32 garage + storage combo.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 garage + storage combo?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 garage + storage combo in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×32 garage + storage combo add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×32 garage + storage combo typically adds $5,120–$7,680 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage + Storage Combo quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray metal shed with single-slope roof and open side bays on rolling farmland

20×32 Garage + Storage Combo

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black open-front metal shed with single-slope roof and wood posts beside a pond

20×32 Commercial Storage Building

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Commercial Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $11,300

12

20×32 Commercial Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,900$11,300SAVE $1,600
or $235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Commercial Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Commercial Storage Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Small-business owners use the 20×32 as inventory storage, contractor lockup, or dry-goods overflow. A 20×32 roll-up handles pallet jacks; 26-gauge walls and 12-gauge frame meet most county commercial code. IBC-compliant.

You’re viewing:Commercial Storage Building·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$11,000
20×32
this size
$11,300
20×35
longer
$12,200
24×32
wider
$13,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • 26 GA Walls
  • IBC Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-COMMERCIAL-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 commercial storage building.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Small-business owners use the 20×32 as inventory storage, contractor lockup, or dry-goods overflow.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Commercial Storage Building layout.

Small-business owners use the 20×32 as inventory storage, contractor lockup, or dry-goods overflow. A 20×32 roll-up handles pallet jacks; 26-gauge walls and 12-gauge frame meet most county commercial code. IBC-compliant drawings included for permit submission.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Storage Building works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Commercial Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Storage Building spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial storage building
Everyday commercial storage building
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial storage building + seasonal storage
commercial storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Commercial Storage Building, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 commercial storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Commercial Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Commercial Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Storage Building also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 commercial storage building cost?

A 20×32 commercial storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 commercial storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 commercial storage building?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 commercial storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 commercial storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 commercial storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 20×32 commercial storage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 commercial storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 commercial storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×32 commercial storage building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black open-front metal shed with single-slope roof and wood posts beside a pond

20×32 Commercial Storage Building

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal barn with cupola, crossbuck doors and side porch in a mountain valley

20×32 Man Cave / Hangout

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Man Cave / Hangout | Steel and Stud, From $9,450

12

20×32 Man Cave / Hangout
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Man Cave / Hangout

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Man Cave / Hangout, built for hobby and recreational use.

Homeowners convert the 20×32 into a finished hangout with insulation, drywall-ready interior, two 20×32 windows, and a French-door entry. 640 sq ft fits a pool table, bar, lounge area, and TV wall comfortably. Spec a.

You’re viewing:Man Cave / Hangout·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,150
20×32
this size
$9,450
20×35
longer
$10,350
24×32
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • French Doors
  • Skylight
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-MAN-CAVE-HANGOUTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 man cave / hangout.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Homeowners convert the 20×32 into a finished hangout with insulation, drywall-ready interior, two 20×32 windows, and a French-door entry.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 32′ · 640 ground + loft

Man Cave / Hangout layout.

Homeowners convert the 20×32 into a finished hangout with insulation, drywall-ready interior, two 20×32 windows, and a French-door entry. 640 sq ft fits a pool table, bar, lounge area, and TV wall comfortably. Spec a mini-split rough-in for HVAC.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave / Hangout works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Man Cave / Hangout in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / Hangout.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / Hangout spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / Hangout.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / hangout
Everyday man cave / hangout
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / hangout.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / hangout + seasonal storage
man cave / hangout + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Man Cave / Hangout, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 man cave / hangout is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / Hangout shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Man Cave / Hangout buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Man Cave / Hangout

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / Hangout · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / Hangout also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / Hangout questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 man cave / hangout cost?

A 20×32 man cave / hangout from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 man cave / hangout price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave / hangout ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 man cave / hangout?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / hangout different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 man cave / hangout need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 man cave / hangout delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 man cave / hangout without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 20×32 man cave / hangout.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 man cave / hangout?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 man cave / hangout in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×32 man cave / hangout for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave / hangout to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / Hangout quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal barn with cupola, crossbuck doors and side porch in a mountain valley

20×32 Man Cave / Hangout

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

20×32 She Shed / Studio

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 She Shed / Studio | Steel and Stud, From $9,450

12

20×32 She Shed / Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32She Shed / Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 She Shed / Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Backyard creators use the 20×32 as an art studio, yoga space, or home office detached from the main house. Three skylights flood the studio with natural light; insulated metal panels keep it quiet. White walls with Barn.

You’re viewing:She Shed / Studio·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,150
20×32
this size
$9,450
20×35
longer
$10,350
24×32
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • Skylights
  • Insulated Panels
  • Storefront Window
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-SHE-SHED-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 she shed / studio.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Backyard creators use the 20×32 as an art studio, yoga space, or home office detached from the main house.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 32′ · 640 ground + loft

She Shed / Studio layout.

Backyard creators use the 20×32 as an art studio, yoga space, or home office detached from the main house. Three skylights flood the studio with natural light; insulated metal panels keep it quiet. White walls with Barn Red trim is the most-ordered combo for this build.

💡 Pro tip:She Shed / Studio works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 She Shed / Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She Shed / Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She Shed / Studio spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She Shed / Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday she shed / studio
Everyday she shed / studio
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she shed / studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe shed / studio + seasonal storage
she shed / studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 She Shed / Studio, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 she shed / studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She Shed / Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 She Shed / Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 She Shed / Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She Shed / Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She Shed / Studio also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She Shed / Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 she shed / studio cost?

A 20×32 she shed / studio from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 she shed / studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she shed / studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 she shed / studio?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she shed / studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 she shed / studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 she shed / studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 she shed / studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 20×32 she shed / studio.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 she shed / studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 she shed / studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×32 she shed / studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×32 she shed / studio typically adds $5,120–$7,680 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your She Shed / Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

20×32 She Shed / Studio

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building with black roll-up door and a scissor lift on a trailer outside

20×32 Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay | Steel and Stud, From $11,300

12

20×32 Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,900$11,300SAVE $1,600
or $235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Independent mechanics and detailers run a single-bay shop in 640 sq ft with room for a lift, tool chest wall, and customer pull-up. 12-foot leg height clears a 2-post lift. Concrete slab spec’d at 5 inches handles.

You’re viewing:Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$11,000
20×32
this size
$11,300
20×35
longer
$12,200
24×32
wider
$13,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Leg Height
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-AUTO-DETAIL-MECHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Independent mechanics and detailers run a single-bay shop in 640 sq ft with room for a lift, tool chest wall, and customer pull-up.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay layout.

Independent mechanics and detailers run a single-bay shop in 640 sq ft with room for a lift, tool chest wall, and customer pull-up. 12-foot leg height clears a 2-post lift. Concrete slab spec’d at 5 inches handles vehicle loads and lift anchoring.

💡 Pro tip:Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday auto detail / mechanic bay
Everyday auto detail / mechanic bay
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto detail / mechanic bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto detail / mechanic bay + seasonal storage
auto detail / mechanic bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay cost?

A 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud auto detail / mechanic bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto detail / mechanic bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building with black roll-up door and a scissor lift on a trailer outside

20×32 Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel carport with attached enclosed garage sheltering a tractor and pickup at sunset

20×32 Equipment & Tractor Shed

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Equipment & Tractor Shed | Steel and Stud, From $10,100

12

20×32 Equipment & Tractor Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,500$10,100SAVE $1,400
or $210/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Equipment & Tractor Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Equipment & Tractor Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Rural property owners park a compact tractor, mower, ATV, and small trailer side-by-side under a 20×32 roof. Open carport configuration with one closed end keeps weather off equipment without permit headaches. Add a.

You’re viewing:Equipment & Tractor Shed·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,100$11,500Save $1,400
or as low as $210/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,800
20×32
this size
$10,100
20×35
longer
$11,000
24×32
wider
$12,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Carport
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • Galvalume
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-EQUIPMENT-TRACTOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 equipment & tractor shed.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Rural property owners park a compact tractor, mower, ATV, and small trailer side-by-side under a 20×32 roof.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft shop

Equipment & Tractor Shed layout.

Rural property owners park a compact tractor, mower, ATV, and small trailer side-by-side under a 20×32 roof. Open carport configuration with one closed end keeps weather off equipment without permit headaches. Add a 10-foot lean-to for hay or implements.

💡 Pro tip:Equipment & Tractor Shed works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Equipment & Tractor Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Tractor Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Tractor Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Tractor Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & tractor shed
Everyday equipment & tractor shed
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & tractor shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & tractor shed + seasonal storage
equipment & tractor shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Equipment & Tractor Shed, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$210/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 equipment & tractor shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $210/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Tractor Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Equipment & Tractor Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Equipment & Tractor Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Tractor Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Tractor Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Tractor Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 equipment & tractor shed cost?

A 20×32 equipment & tractor shed from Steel and Stud starts at $10,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $210/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 equipment & tractor shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment & tractor shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 equipment & tractor shed?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & tractor shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 equipment & tractor shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 equipment & tractor shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 equipment & tractor shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $210/month on a 20×32 equipment & tractor shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 equipment & tractor shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 equipment & tractor shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×32 equipment & tractor shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Tractor Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel carport with attached enclosed garage sheltering a tractor and pickup at sunset

20×32 Equipment & Tractor Shed

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a metal workshop with a plasma table and steel building stock racks

20×32 Light Fabrication Shop

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Light Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $11,700

12

20×32 Light Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,350$11,700SAVE $1,650
or $244/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Light Fabrication Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Light Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Welders and small fabricators run a one-person shop in the 20×32 with 14-16 foot legs for crane or hoist clearance. Reinforced roof framing supports a 1-ton trolley; 12-gauge frame handles vibration. Roll-up door sized.

You’re viewing:Light Fabrication Shop·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,700$13,350Save $1,650
or as low as $244/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$11,400
20×32
this size
$11,700
20×35
longer
$12,600
24×32
wider
$13,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • Reinforced Roof
  • 16′ Leg Height
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-LIGHT-FABRICATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 light fabrication shop.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Welders and small fabricators run a one-person shop in the 20×32 with 14-16 foot legs for crane or hoist clearance.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Light Fabrication Shop layout.

Welders and small fabricators run a one-person shop in the 20×32 with 14-16 foot legs for crane or hoist clearance. Reinforced roof framing supports a 1-ton trolley; 12-gauge frame handles vibration. Roll-up door sized 20×32 for material in-feed.

💡 Pro tip:Light Fabrication Shop works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Light Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Light Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Light Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Light Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday light fabrication shop
Everyday light fabrication shop
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a light fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlight fabrication shop + seasonal storage
light fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Light Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$244/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 light fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $244/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Light Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Light Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Light Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Light Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Light Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Light Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 light fabrication shop cost?

A 20×32 light fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $11,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $244/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 light fabrication shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud light fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 light fabrication shop?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud light fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 light fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 light fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 light fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $244/month on a 20×32 light fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 light fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 light fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×32 light fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 20×32 light fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Light Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a metal workshop with a plasma table and steel building stock racks

20×32 Light Fabrication Shop

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure event venue with black-framed glass entry and fountains in a modern courtyard

20×32 Community / Church Storage

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Community / Church Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,400

12

20×32 Community / Church Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,000$11,400SAVE $1,600
or $238/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Community / Church Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Community / Church Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

Churches, schools, and HOAs use the 20×32 as event-gear storage, groundskeeping equipment lockup, or a backup classroom with insulation and HVAC. Stamped engineered drawings meet IBC and IRC requirements for.

You’re viewing:Community / Church Storage·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,400$13,000Save $1,600
or as low as $238/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$11,100
20×32
this size
$11,400
20×35
longer
$12,300
24×32
wider
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • IBC Certified
  • Insulated
  • Steel Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-COMMUNITY-CHURCHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 community / church storage.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Churches, schools, and HOAs use the 20×32 as event-gear storage, groundskeeping equipment lockup, or a backup classroom with insulation and HVAC.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Community / Church Storage layout.

Churches, schools, and HOAs use the 20×32 as event-gear storage, groundskeeping equipment lockup, or a backup classroom with insulation and HVAC. Stamped engineered drawings meet IBC and IRC requirements for institutional sites with public access.

💡 Pro tip:Community / Church Storage works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Community / Church Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community / Church Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community / Church Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community / Church Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday community / church storage
Everyday community / church storage
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community / church storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity / church storage + seasonal storage
community / church storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Community / Church Storage, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$238/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 community / church storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $238/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community / Church Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Community / Church Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Community / Church Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Community / Church Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community / Church Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community / Church Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 community / church storage cost?

A 20×32 community / church storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 community / church storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud community / church storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 community / church storage?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community / church storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 community / church storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 community / church storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 community / church storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 20×32 community / church storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 community / church storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 community / church storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×32 community / church storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Community / Church Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure event venue with black-framed glass entry and fountains in a modern courtyard

20×32 Community / Church Storage

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with brown roll-up door and white entry in autumn woods

12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 12×30 garage feels cramped. The extra 10 feet behind the vehicle holds a workbench, rolling tool chest, and pegboard wall. A full-size F-150 (19’6") fits with 10+ feet of.

You’re viewing:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-METAL-GARAGE-ONEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 12×30 garage feels cramped.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) layout.

Homeowners pick this layout when a standard 12×30 garage feels cramped. The extra 10 feet behind the vehicle holds a workbench, rolling tool chest, and pegboard wall. A full-size F-150 (19’6") fits with 10+ feet of clear bench space behind the bumper.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop).

DAILY USEEveryday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
Everyday metal garage (one-car + workshop)
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal garage (one-car + workshop).
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
metal garage (one-car + workshop) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop), what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) cost?

A 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal garage (one-car + workshop) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop).

What warranty comes with the 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with brown roll-up door and white entry in autumn woods

12×30 Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal shed with single-slope roof and open front in rocky mountain terrain

12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Carport for Truck + Trailer

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer, built for daily backyard use.

Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility trailer hitched, end to end. Small property owners use this when a 12×30 carport leaves the trailer tongue exposed. Vertical roof sheds.

You’re viewing:Carport for Truck + Trailer·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 140 MPH Rated
  • Open Sides
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-CARPORT-TRUCK-TRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 carport for truck + trailer.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility trailer hitched, end to end.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

Carport for Truck + Trailer layout.

Open-side carport configuration covers a crew-cab pickup with a bumper-pull utility trailer hitched, end to end. Small property owners use this when a 12×30 carport leaves the trailer tongue exposed. Vertical roof sheds rain off both sides without gutter overflow.

💡 Pro tip:Carport for Truck + Trailer works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport for Truck + Trailer.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport for Truck + Trailer spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport for Truck + Trailer.

DAILY USEEveryday carport for truck + trailer
Everyday carport for truck + trailer
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport for truck + trailer.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
carport for truck + trailer + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 carport for truck + trailer is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport for Truck + Trailer shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport for Truck + Trailer · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport for Truck + Trailer also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport for Truck + Trailer questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer cost?

A 12×30 carport for truck + trailer from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 carport for truck + trailer price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport for truck + trailer different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 carport for truck + trailer?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 carport for truck + trailer in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 carport for truck + trailer add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 carport for truck + trailer typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport for Truck + Trailer quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal shed with single-slope roof and open front in rocky mountain terrain

12×30 Carport for Truck + Trailer

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green rv metal cover with timber posts framing a motorhome below snowy peaks

12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Boat & RV Storage Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover, built for hobby and recreational use.

Hobbyists with a 24′-26′ bass boat on a tandem-axle trailer fit it under a 12×30 canopy with the outboard cleared. Class-B vans and small Class-C RVs (under 28′) also tuck inside at 12-14′ leg height. Saves $1,200+ a.

You’re viewing:Boat & RV Storage Cover·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • A-Frame Vertical
  • 12′ Leg Height
  • UV-Resistant Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-BOAT-RV-STORAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 boat & rv storage cover.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Hobbyists with a 24′-26′ bass boat on a tandem-axle trailer fit it under a 12×30 canopy with the outboard cleared.

RV BAYDaily Driver12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft · tall walls

Boat & RV Storage Cover layout.

Hobbyists with a 24′-26′ bass boat on a tandem-axle trailer fit it under a 12×30 canopy with the outboard cleared. Class-B vans and small Class-C RVs (under 28′) also tuck inside at 12-14′ leg height. Saves $1,200+ a year over commercial storage lots.

💡 Pro tip:Boat & RV Storage Cover works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & RV Storage Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & RV Storage Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & RV Storage Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & rv storage cover
Everyday boat & rv storage cover
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & rv storage cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & rv storage cover + seasonal storage
boat & rv storage cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 boat & rv storage cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & RV Storage Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & RV Storage Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & RV Storage Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & RV Storage Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 boat & rv storage cover cost?

A 12×30 boat & rv storage cover from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 boat & rv storage cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat & rv storage cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 boat & rv storage cover?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & rv storage cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 boat & rv storage cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 boat & rv storage cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 boat & rv storage cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 boat & rv storage cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 boat & rv storage cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 boat & rv storage cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×30 boat & rv storage cover for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat & rv storage cover to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & RV Storage Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green rv metal cover with timber posts framing a motorhome below snowy peaks

12×30 Boat & RV Storage Cover

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal shed storage interior with wire shelving, bins, hanging bikes, and riding mower entering

12×30 Storage Building (Backyard)

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Storage Building (Backyard) | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Storage Building (Backyard)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Storage Building (Backyard)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Storage Building (Backyard), built for daily backyard use.

Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement. Holds two riding mowers, a snowblower, kayaks on a wall rack, and seasonal bins on shelving. Single 12×30 roll-up plus a 36" walk-in door.

You’re viewing:Storage Building (Backyard)·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 29 GA Panels
  • Walk-In Door
  • R-13 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 storage building (backyard).

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft shop

Storage Building (Backyard) layout.

Fully enclosed storage shed for homeowners with too much gear and no basement. Holds two riding mowers, a snowblower, kayaks on a wall rack, and seasonal bins on shelving. Single 12×30 roll-up plus a 36" walk-in door makes daily access easy.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Building (Backyard) works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Storage Building (Backyard) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building (Backyard).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building (Backyard) spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building (Backyard).

DAILY USEEveryday storage building (backyard)
Everyday storage building (backyard)
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building (backyard).
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building (backyard) + seasonal storage
storage building (backyard) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Storage Building (Backyard), what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 storage building (backyard) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building (Backyard) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Storage Building (Backyard) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Storage Building (Backyard)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building (Backyard) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building (Backyard) also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building (Backyard) questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 storage building (backyard) cost?

A 12×30 storage building (backyard) from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 storage building (backyard) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building (backyard) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 storage building (backyard)?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building (backyard) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 storage building (backyard) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 storage building (backyard) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 storage building (backyard) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 storage building (backyard).

What warranty comes with the 12×30 storage building (backyard)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 storage building (backyard) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 storage building (backyard) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 storage building (backyard) typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building (Backyard) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal shed storage interior with wire shelving, bins, hanging bikes, and riding mower entering

12×30 Storage Building (Backyard)

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building kit with cream roll-up door and window in a landscaped garden

12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, built for daily backyard use.

Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout with walking room left over. Gardeners running a small property use the.

You’re viewing:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Vertical Roof
  • Galvalume Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-LAWN-GARDEN-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout with walking room left over.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft shop

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover layout.

Zero-turn mower parked next to a push mower, with string trimmers on wall hooks and a potting bench against the gable, all fit inside this layout with walking room left over. Gardeners running a small property use the long 30-foot wall for double sliding barn doors so a sub-compact tractor can drive straight in. Galvalume trim shrugs off fertilizer and irrigation overspray.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn & garden equipment cover
Everyday lawn & garden equipment cover
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn & garden equipment cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
lawn & garden equipment cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover cost?

A 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn & garden equipment cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building kit with cream roll-up door and window in a landscaped garden

12×30 Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel structure office with flat roof and glass front beside landscaped parking

12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Workshop / Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 12×30 enclosed for a dedicated 360 sq ft workspace. Insulated walls plus a mini-split keep it usable year-round. Two 12×30 windows on the.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Room·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 2 Windows Std
  • Insulated Walk-In
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 workshop / hobby room.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 12×30 enclosed for a dedicated 360 sq ft workspace.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

Workshop / Hobby Room layout.

Hobbyists building a woodshop, leather studio, or model railroad layout use the 12×30 enclosed for a dedicated 360 sq ft workspace. Insulated walls plus a mini-split keep it usable year-round. Two 12×30 windows on the long wall pull in natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop / Hobby Room works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby room
Everyday workshop / hobby room
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 workshop / hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 workshop / hobby room cost?

A 12×30 workshop / hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 workshop / hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 workshop / hobby room?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 workshop / hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 workshop / hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 workshop / hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 workshop / hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 workshop / hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 workshop / hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 workshop / hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 workshop / hobby room typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel structure office with flat roof and glass front beside landscaped parking

12×30 Workshop / Hobby Room

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure wellness studio in dusty rose with covered workout porch and glass doors

12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Home Office / Backyard Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready interior, and a 36" entry door. 360 sq ft fits a desk zone, lounge corner, and a small kitchenette wall. Add wainscoting and Pewter Gray.

You’re viewing:Home Office / Backyard Studio·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Package
  • HOA-Friendly Colors
  • French Door Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-HOME-OFFICE-BACKBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 home office / backyard studio.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready interior, and a 36" entry door.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

Home Office / Backyard Studio layout.

Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready interior, and a 36" entry door. 360 sq ft fits a desk zone, lounge corner, and a small kitchenette wall. Add wainscoting and Pewter Gray walls for residential curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office / Backyard Studio works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office / Backyard Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office / Backyard Studio spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office / Backyard Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office / backyard studio
Everyday home office / backyard studio
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office / backyard studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
home office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 home office / backyard studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office / Backyard Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office / Backyard Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office / Backyard Studio also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office / Backyard Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 home office / backyard studio cost?

A 12×30 home office / backyard studio from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 home office / backyard studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 home office / backyard studio?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 home office / backyard studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 home office / backyard studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 home office / backyard studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 home office / backyard studio.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 home office / backyard studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 home office / backyard studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 home office / backyard studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 home office / backyard studio typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office / Backyard Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure wellness studio in dusty rose with covered workout porch and glass doors

12×30 Home Office / Backyard Studio

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open front metal shed with single slope roof and wood posts near grain bins

12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover | Steel and Stud, From $5,950

12

12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,800$5,950SAVE $850
or $124/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Hay & Feed Storage Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, built for farm and ranch demands.

Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×30 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side open lets you back a flatbed straight up. Vertical roof prevents.

You’re viewing:Hay & Feed Storage Cover·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,950$6,800Save $850
or as low as $124/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,900
12×30
this size
$5,950
12×32
longer
$6,300
14×30
wider
$6,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 3-Side Enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • 65 PSF Snow
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-HAY-FEED-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 hay & feed storage cover.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×30 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

Hay & Feed Storage Cover layout.

Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×30 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side open lets you back a flatbed straight up. Vertical roof prevents water pooling on long runs.

💡 Pro tip:Hay & Feed Storage Cover works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Feed Storage Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & feed storage cover
Everyday hay & feed storage cover
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & feed storage cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
hay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$124/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 hay & feed storage cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $124/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Feed Storage Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Feed Storage Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Feed Storage Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Feed Storage Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 hay & feed storage cover cost?

A 12×30 hay & feed storage cover from Steel and Stud starts at $5,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $124/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 hay & feed storage cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 hay & feed storage cover?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 hay & feed storage cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 hay & feed storage cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 hay & feed storage cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $124/month on a 12×30 hay & feed storage cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 hay & feed storage cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 hay & feed storage cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×30 hay & feed storage cover stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Feed Storage Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open front metal shed with single slope roof and wood posts near grain bins

12×30 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel building storage shed with open roll-up door showing zero turn mower and shelving

12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all inside 360 sq ft. Roll-up door on the gable end lets you ride in and out without dismounting. Common spec for hunting cabins and rural.

You’re viewing:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Mud-Friendly Galvalume
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-ATV-SIDE-BY-SIDEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all inside 360 sq ft.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage layout.

Two side-by-sides parked nose-to-tail, or a UTV plus 2 ATVs plus a gear wall, all inside 360 sq ft. Roll-up door on the gable end lets you ride in and out without dismounting. Common spec for hunting cabins and rural hobbyists.

💡 Pro tip:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv & side-by-side garage
Everyday atv & side-by-side garage
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv & side-by-side garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
atv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV & Side-by-Side Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV & Side-by-Side Garage also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage cost?

A 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×30 atv & side-by-side garage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv & side-by-side garage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel building storage shed with open roll-up door showing zero turn mower and shelving

12×30 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure poolside cabana with glass door, black-trimmed windows and lounge chairs

12×30 Pool House / Cabana

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Pool House / Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Pool House / Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Pool House / Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Pool House / Cabana, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×30 as a pool house with a covered changing room, equipment storage, and a shaded lounge zone. Split it 12×30 enclosed plus a 12×30 open-side cover, same building, two.

You’re viewing:Pool House / Cabana·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Partial Enclosure
  • Custom Color Match
  • French Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-POOL-HOUSE-CABANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 pool house / cabana.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×30 as a pool house with a covered changing room, equipment storage, and a shaded lounge zone.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft ADU

Pool House / Cabana layout.

Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×30 as a pool house with a covered changing room, equipment storage, and a shaded lounge zone. Split it 12×30 enclosed plus a 12×30 open-side cover, same building, two functions.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House / Cabana works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Pool House / Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House / Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House / Cabana spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House / Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house / cabana
Everyday pool house / cabana
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house / cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house / cabana + seasonal storage
pool house / cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Pool House / Cabana, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 pool house / cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House / Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Pool House / Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Pool House / Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House / Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House / Cabana also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House / Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 pool house / cabana cost?

A 12×30 pool house / cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 pool house / cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house / cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 pool house / cabana?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house / cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 pool house / cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 pool house / cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 pool house / cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 pool house / cabana.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 pool house / cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 pool house / cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 pool house / cabana add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 pool house / cabana typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House / Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure poolside cabana with glass door, black-trimmed windows and lounge chairs

12×30 Pool House / Cabana

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Backyard prefab metal building gym in coastal teal with double barn doors and treadmill

12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Tool Shed for Contractors

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors, built for daily backyard use.

Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock, compressor, miter saw station, and stacked totes. The 12×30 roll-up swallows a full sheet of plywood flat. Slide bolt plus deadbolt plus.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed for Contractors·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,250
12×30
this size
$5,300
12×32
longer
$5,650
14×30
wider
$6,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Deadbolt + Wi-Fi
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-TOOL-SHED-CONTRABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 tool shed for contractors.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock, compressor, miter saw station, and stacked totes.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft

Tool Shed for Contractors layout.

Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock, compressor, miter saw station, and stacked totes. The 12×30 roll-up swallows a full sheet of plywood flat. Slide bolt plus deadbolt plus Wi-Fi opener keeps it secure overnight.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed for Contractors works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed for Contractors.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed for Contractors spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed for Contractors.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed for contractors
Everyday tool shed for contractors
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed for contractors.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
tool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 tool shed for contractors is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed for Contractors shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed for Contractors · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed for Contractors also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🌾 12×30

Tractor & Implement Lean-To

12×30 tractor & implement lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor & Implement Lean-To →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed for Contractors questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 tool shed for contractors cost?

A 12×30 tool shed for contractors from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 tool shed for contractors price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 tool shed for contractors?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 tool shed for contractors need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 tool shed for contractors delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 tool shed for contractors without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 12×30 tool shed for contractors.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 tool shed for contractors?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 tool shed for contractors in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×30 tool shed for contractors add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×30 tool shed for contractors typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed for Contractors quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Backyard prefab metal building gym in coastal teal with double barn doors and treadmill

12×30 Tool Shed for Contractors

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building with dark trim, lean to covered patio, and string lights at dusk

12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $5,950

12

12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,800$5,950SAVE $850
or $124/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×30Tractor & Implement Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, built for farm and ranch demands.

Configured as a lean-to or attached to an existing pole barn, the 12×30 covers a sub-compact tractor with a 5′ brush hog, plus a box blade and post-hole digger lined up behind it. Open gable ends let you drive straight.

You’re viewing:Tractor & Implement Lean-To·Size12×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,950$6,800Save $850
or as low as $124/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×30
12×24
smaller
$4,900
12×30
this size
$5,950
12×32
longer
$6,300
14×30
wider
$6,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Config
  • Attaches To Existing
  • Open Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X30-TRACTOR-IMPLEMENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to.

12 feet wide × 30 feet long. Configured as a lean-to or attached to an existing pole barn, the 12×30 covers a sub-compact tractor with a 5′ brush hog, plus a box blade and post-hole digger lined up behind it.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 30′ · 360 sq ft shop

Tractor & Implement Lean-To layout.

Configured as a lean-to or attached to an existing pole barn, the 12×30 covers a sub-compact tractor with a 5′ brush hog, plus a box blade and post-hole digger lined up behind it. Open gable ends let you drive straight through.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor & Implement Lean-To works well at 12×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor & Implement Lean-To spec sheet.

Width12′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor & implement lean-to
Everyday tractor & implement lean-to
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor & implement lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
tractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$124/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $124/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×30?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 30′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor & Implement Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor & Implement Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor & Implement Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 12×30

Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop)

12×30 metal garage (one-car + workshop) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (One-Car + Workshop) →

🏡 12×30

Carport for Truck + Trailer

12×30 carport for truck + trailer configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Truck + Trailer →

🎯 12×30

Boat & RV Storage Cover

12×30 boat & rv storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & RV Storage Cover →

🏡 12×30

Storage Building (Backyard)

12×30 storage building (backyard) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building (Backyard) →

🏡 12×30

Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover

12×30 lawn & garden equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Cover →

🏡 12×30

Workshop / Hobby Room

12×30 workshop / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Room →

🏡 12×30

Home Office / Backyard Studio

12×30 home office / backyard studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Backyard Studio →

🌾 12×30

Hay & Feed Storage Cover

12×30 hay & feed storage cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Storage Cover →

🎯 12×30

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

12×30 atv & side-by-side garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV & Side-by-Side Garage →

🏡 12×30

Pool House / Cabana

12×30 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×30

Tool Shed for Contractors

12×30 tool shed for contractors configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Contractors →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor & Implement Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to cost?

A 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $5,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $124/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $124/month on a 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×30 tractor & implement lean-to stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor & Implement Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building with dark trim, lean to covered patio, and string lights at dusk

12×30 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×30 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Light gray metal garage with black roof and black roll-up door near a pond

18×20 One-Car Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 One-Car Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 One-Car Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20One-Car Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 One-Car Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners replacing a tired wood-frame garage pick this footprint because it fits a full-size sedan or mid-size SUV with 3 ft of side clearance for opening doors. The extra 2 ft over a 16-wide gives you a real.

You’re viewing:One-Car Garage·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 9×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-ONE-CAR-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 one-car garage.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Homeowners replacing a tired wood-frame garage pick this footprint because it fits a full-size sedan or mid-size SUV with 3 ft of side clearance for opening doors.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

One-Car Garage layout.

Homeowners replacing a tired wood-frame garage pick this footprint because it fits a full-size sedan or mid-size SUV with 3 ft of side clearance for opening doors. The extra 2 ft over a 16-wide gives you a real walk-around. Adds resale value and code-compliant covered parking.

💡 Pro tip:One-Car Garage works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 One-Car Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your One-Car Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

One-Car Garage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use One-Car Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday one-car garage
Everyday one-car garage
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a one-car garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWone-car garage + seasonal storage
one-car garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 One-Car Garage, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 one-car garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from One-Car Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 One-Car Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 One-Car Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your One-Car Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose One-Car Garage also viewed:

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

One-Car Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 one-car garage cost?

A 18×20 one-car garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 one-car garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud one-car garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 one-car garage?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud one-car garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 one-car garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 one-car garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 one-car garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 one-car garage.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 one-car garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 one-car garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 one-car garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 one-car garage typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your One-Car Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Light gray metal garage with black roof and black roll-up door near a pond

18×20 One-Car Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green metal workshop with single slope roof, black roll up door, and tall narrow windows

18×20 Backyard Workshop

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Backyard Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Backyard Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Backyard Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Backyard Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists building a woodshop or metal-fab corner spec the 12 ft leg height for clearance over a table saw and dust-collection ductwork. The 18 ft width holds a 4 ft workbench, two rolling tool chests, and a center.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • Vertical Roof
  • Skylight Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 backyard workshop.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Hobbyists building a woodshop or metal-fab corner spec the 12 ft leg height for clearance over a table saw and dust-collection ductwork.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Backyard Workshop layout.

Hobbyists building a woodshop or metal-fab corner spec the 12 ft leg height for clearance over a table saw and dust-collection ductwork. The 18 ft width holds a 4 ft workbench, two rolling tool chests, and a center floor zone for sheet-goods cuts. Skylights and a 36-inch walk-in door round it out.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Backyard Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop
Everyday backyard workshop
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop + seasonal storage
backyard workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Backyard Workshop, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 backyard workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Backyard Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Backyard Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 backyard workshop cost?

A 18×20 backyard workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 backyard workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 backyard workshop?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 backyard workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 backyard workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 backyard workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 backyard workshop.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 backyard workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 backyard workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 backyard workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 backyard workshop typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green metal workshop with single slope roof, black roll up door, and tall narrow windows

18×20 Backyard Workshop

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Crimson metal shed with open bays and wood posts as a loafing shelter in hill country

18×20 Storage Shed

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Storage Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Storage Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Storage Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Storage Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Small property owners who outgrew a 18×20 plastic shed step up to an 18×20 metal shed for ride-on mower, snow-blower, kayaks, and seasonal patio furniture all in one steel-walled enclosure. A double-roll-up on the gable.

You’re viewing:Storage Shed·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • 29 GA Panels
  • Double Roll-Up
  • 20-Yr Warranty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-STORAGE-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 storage shed.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Small property owners who outgrew a 18×20 plastic shed step up to an 18×20 metal shed for ride-on mower, snow-blower, kayaks, and seasonal patio furniture all in one steel-walled enclosure.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft shop

Storage Shed layout.

Small property owners who outgrew a 18×20 plastic shed step up to an 18×20 metal shed for ride-on mower, snow-blower, kayaks, and seasonal patio furniture all in one steel-walled enclosure. A double-roll-up on the gable end lets you back the mower in straight. Far cheaper than building a wood storage shed.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Shed works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Storage Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Shed spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday storage shed
Everyday storage shed
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage shed + seasonal storage
storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Storage Shed, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Storage Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Storage Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Shed also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 storage shed cost?

A 18×20 storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 storage shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 storage shed?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 storage shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 storage shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 storage shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 storage shed.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 storage shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 storage shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 storage shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 storage shed typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Crimson metal shed with open bays and wood posts as a loafing shelter in hill country

18×20 Storage Shed

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building with black roof and black roll-up door beside fenced pasture

18×20 Garage with Loft

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Garage with Loft | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Garage with Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Garage with Loft

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Garage with Loft, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building. The loft holds seasonal totes, hunting gear, or a future bunk space while the floor stays open.

You’re viewing:Garage with Loft·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered Loft
  • 14′ Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-GARAGE-LOFTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 garage with loft.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Garage with Loft layout.

Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building. The loft holds seasonal totes, hunting gear, or a future bunk space while the floor stays open for the vehicle. Stamped drawings cover the loft load.

💡 Pro tip:Garage with Loft works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Garage with Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage with Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage with Loft spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage with Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday garage with loft
Everyday garage with loft
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage with loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage with loft + seasonal storage
garage with loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Garage with Loft, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 garage with loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage with Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Garage with Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Garage with Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage with Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage with Loft also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage with Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 garage with loft cost?

A 18×20 garage with loft from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 garage with loft price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage with loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 garage with loft?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage with loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 garage with loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 garage with loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 garage with loft without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 garage with loft.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 garage with loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 garage with loft in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 garage with loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 garage with loft typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage with Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building with black roof and black roll-up door beside fenced pasture

18×20 Garage with Loft

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building at dusk with lit picture windows showing a home hobby studio inside

18×20 Home Office

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Home Office | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Home Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Home Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Home Office, built for daily backyard use.

Remote workers spec R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, and a French-door entry to turn 360 sq ft into a permitted home office detached from the main house. Holds a desk, conference seating for four, and a printer.

You’re viewing:Home Office·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • French Doors
  • Year-Round Use
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-HOME-OFFICEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 home office.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Remote workers spec R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, and a French-door entry to turn 360 sq ft into a permitted home office detached from the main house.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Home Office layout.

Remote workers spec R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, and a French-door entry to turn 360 sq ft into a permitted home office detached from the main house. Holds a desk, conference seating for four, and a printer credenza. Insulated metal panels keep it usable year-round in any climate zone.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Home Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office.

DAILY USEEveryday home office
Everyday home office
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office + seasonal storage
home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Home Office, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Home Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Home Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 home office cost?

A 18×20 home office from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 home office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 home office?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 home office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 home office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 home office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 home office.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 home office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 home office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 home office add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 home office typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building at dusk with lit picture windows showing a home hobby studio inside

18×20 Home Office

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building at dusk with lit picture windows showing a home hobby studio inside

18×20 Hobby Room

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists running model trains, RC cars, ham radio, or pottery wheels use the full 360 sq ft as a dedicated room away from the house. A 12 ft leg height fits ceiling-mounted antennas or a kiln vent. Insulation plus a.

You’re viewing:Hobby Room·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated
  • 12′ Legs Optional
  • Quiet Buildout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-HOBBY-ROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 hobby room.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Hobbyists running model trains, RC cars, ham radio, or pottery wheels use the full 360 sq ft as a dedicated room away from the house.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑18′ × 20′ · 360 ground + loft

Hobby Room layout.

Hobbyists running model trains, RC cars, ham radio, or pottery wheels use the full 360 sq ft as a dedicated room away from the house. A 12 ft leg height fits ceiling-mounted antennas or a kiln vent. Insulation plus a window AC keeps the temperature stable.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Room works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby room
Everyday hobby room
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby room + seasonal storage
hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Hobby Room, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 hobby room cost?

A 18×20 hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 hobby room?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 hobby room typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building at dusk with lit picture windows showing a home hobby studio inside

18×20 Hobby Room

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal shed with single-slope roof and open side bays on a fenced pasture at sunset

18×20 Tool Shed

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Tool Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Tool Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Tool Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Tool Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed separate from vehicle storage. Wall-to-wall French cleat boards, a rolling tool chest, and a workbench leave a clear floor for.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Slide Bolt Lock
  • Walk-In Door
  • 14 GA Standard
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-TOOL-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 tool shed.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed separate from vehicle storage.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Tool Shed layout.

Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed separate from vehicle storage. Wall-to-wall French cleat boards, a rolling tool chest, and a workbench leave a clear floor for project assembly. Lockable walk-in door keeps everything secure.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Tool Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed
Everyday tool shed
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed + seasonal storage
tool shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Tool Shed, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 tool shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Tool Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Tool Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 tool shed cost?

A 18×20 tool shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 tool shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 tool shed?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 tool shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 tool shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 tool shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 tool shed.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 tool shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 tool shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 tool shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 tool shed typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal shed with single-slope roof and open side bays on a fenced pasture at sunset

18×20 Tool Shed

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open charcoal steel garage revealing boat, ATV and shelving inside a fenced gravel lot

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Zero-turn, push mower, string trimmer, and gas cans all live in one steel-walled building rated for the long haul, the 8 ft roll-up clears most residential mower decks and concrete anchors survive wind events that.

You’re viewing:Mower & Outdoor Power Storage·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 8×8 Roll-Up
  • Hurricane Optional
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-MOWER-OUTDOOR-POBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Zero-turn, push mower, string trimmer, and gas cans all live in one steel-walled building rated for the long haul, the 8 ft roll-up clears most residential mower decks and concrete anchors survive wind events that flatten plastic sheds.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft shop

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage layout.

Zero-turn, push mower, string trimmer, and gas cans all live in one steel-walled building rated for the long haul, the 8 ft roll-up clears most residential mower decks and concrete anchors survive wind events that flatten plastic sheds. Small property owners pick this layout to keep gasoline equipment out of the main garage and away from the house.

💡 Pro tip:Mower & Outdoor Power Storage works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mower & Outdoor Power Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mower & Outdoor Power Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday mower & outdoor power storage
Everyday mower & outdoor power storage
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mower & outdoor power storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmower & outdoor power storage + seasonal storage
mower & outdoor power storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mower & Outdoor Power Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mower & Outdoor Power Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mower & Outdoor Power Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage cost?

A 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mower & outdoor power storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mower & outdoor power storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Mower & Outdoor Power Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open charcoal steel garage revealing boat, ATV and shelving inside a fenced gravel lot

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Coastal pool house interior in a metal building with shiplap walls, barn door, and towel bench

18×20 Pool House

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Pool House | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Pool House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Pool House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Pool House, built for hobby and recreational use.

Backyard pool owners convert 360 sq ft into a cabana with changing area, towel storage, mini-fridge corner, and covered lounge zone. A wide French-door opening on the pool-facing side blurs indoor-outdoor. Insulated.

You’re viewing:Pool House·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • French Doors
  • Insulated Panels
  • Custom Color Match
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-POOL-HOUSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 pool house.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Backyard pool owners convert 360 sq ft into a cabana with changing area, towel storage, mini-fridge corner, and covered lounge zone.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft ADU

Pool House layout.

Backyard pool owners convert 360 sq ft into a cabana with changing area, towel storage, mini-fridge corner, and covered lounge zone. A wide French-door opening on the pool-facing side blurs indoor-outdoor. Insulated metal panels stay comfortable in summer heat.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Pool House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house
Everyday pool house
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house + seasonal storage
pool house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Pool House, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 pool house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Pool House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Pool House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 pool house cost?

A 18×20 pool house from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 pool house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 pool house?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 pool house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 pool house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 pool house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 pool house.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 pool house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 pool house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×20 pool house for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a pool house to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Coastal pool house interior in a metal building with shiplap walls, barn door, and towel bench

18×20 Pool House

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal carport with open sides sheltering a truck and SUV at sunset

18×20 Carport Replacement

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Carport Replacement | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Carport Replacement
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Carport Replacement

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Carport Replacement, built for daily backyard use.

Existing 18×20 carport owners shopping replacement parts often upgrade to a fully enclosed building instead. Same footprint, same anchors in many cases, but four walls and a lockable door solve theft and weather.

You’re viewing:Carport Replacement·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Same Footprint
  • Full Enclosure
  • Upgrade Path
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-CARPORT-REPLACEMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 carport replacement.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Existing 18×20 carport owners shopping replacement parts often upgrade to a fully enclosed building instead.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Carport Replacement layout.

Existing 18×20 carport owners shopping replacement parts often upgrade to a fully enclosed building instead. Same footprint, same anchors in many cases, but four walls and a lockable door solve theft and weather problems for good. Trade-up pricing applies if your old frame still has life.

💡 Pro tip:Carport Replacement works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Carport Replacement in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport Replacement.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport Replacement spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport Replacement.

DAILY USEEveryday carport replacement
Everyday carport replacement
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport replacement.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport replacement + seasonal storage
carport replacement + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Carport Replacement, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 carport replacement is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport Replacement shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Carport Replacement buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Carport Replacement

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport Replacement · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport Replacement also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport Replacement questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 carport replacement cost?

A 18×20 carport replacement from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 carport replacement price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport replacement ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 carport replacement?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport replacement different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 carport replacement need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 carport replacement delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 carport replacement without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 carport replacement.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 carport replacement?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 carport replacement in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 carport replacement add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 carport replacement typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport Replacement quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal carport with open sides sheltering a truck and SUV at sunset

18×20 Carport Replacement

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

NOT SURE WHICH SIZE? BUILD YOUR METAL GARAGE IN 3D AND SEE YOUR PRICE INSTANTLY

Flexible Payment Options

Finance Your Metal Garage

Three ways to own your enclosed steel garage building. No hidden fees. Balance due only after installation is complete.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Garages Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Garage

An enclosed prefabricated steel garage is the most durable and cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, tools, equipment and personal property. Here is why property owners across 48 states chose Steel and Stud.

🔒

Fully Enclosed Protection

Every metal garage comes with complete enclosure: steel roof panels, wall panels on all four sides, a standard garage door and a walk-in entry door. Your vehicles, tools and stored belongings stay protected from weather, theft and pests year round.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel garage order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees or subcontractor surprises. Confirm your site is level and the crew handles everything else.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. Enclosed garages especially benefit from 12-gauge because walls and doors create higher wind load requirements than open carports.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work with multiple manufacturers and cut out distributor markups. Our prefab steel garages typically cost 40 to 60 percent less than comparable stick-built, wood-frame or concrete block construction for the same footprint and clearance height.

🎨

Full 3D Customization

Use our free 3D building designer to configure every detail of your garage: door placement, window locations, lean-to additions, insulation, wainscot, 12 panel colors for roof, walls and trim, and certification options for your climate zone.

Engineered for Your Climate

All enclosed garage structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 140 MPH wind plus 25 PSF snow certification is available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

Verified Reviews

What Our Customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Garages.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"We are very happy with our carport. Even though there was a delay with the installation due to weather, we are glad we went with Steel and Stud."

RG
Robert G.
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
Common Questions

Metal Garages FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Metal garage prices from Steel and Stud start at $6,775 for a standard 20x30x10 enclosed garage. Two-car garages (24x40) range from $9,135 to $16,500 depending on your state, roof style and gauge. Triple-wide garages (30x30 to 30x40) start around $10,688. All tubular steel garage prices include free delivery and professional installation.

Every tubular steel garage order includes full enclosure (roof, walls, and end panels), one standard garage door, one walk-in door, free delivery to your job site, and professional installation by a certified crew. You can add extra doors, windows, lean-tos, insulation and color upgrades through the 3D designer before ordering.

Yes. You can place garage doors on any wall (front, side, or back entry), add roll-up or sectional doors, include polycarbonate or diamond windows for natural light, choose from 12 panel colors, add lean-tos for covered parking, upgrade to insulated wall and roof panels, and select your preferred frame gauge and certification level.

A garage with lean-to combines a fully enclosed metal garage with an attached open or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. The lean-to provides additional covered area for outdoor parking, equipment storage, or a shaded work area without the cost of full wall enclosure. Lean-tos can be added to the left, right, front, or back of the main building.

A concrete slab is strongly recommended for enclosed metal garages. It provides a level floor surface, prevents moisture intrusion from the ground, and allows secure concrete anchor bolt attachment. Ground and gravel installations are available but better suited for open-sided structures. Contact us before pouring your slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement.

Most standard two-car metal garages (20x30 to 24x40) are assembled in one day by a professional crew. Larger triple-wide garages or structures with attached lean-tos may take up to two days. The lead time from order confirmation to installation date is typically 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location and seasonal demand.

12-gauge galvanized steel frames (2.5mm thick) are recommended for enclosed garages. Fully enclosed buildings handle more wind load and snow weight than open carports, and the thicker 12-gauge framing provides the structural integrity needed for long-term performance. 12-gauge frames also carry a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge (1.9mm) is available at a lower price for moderate climates.

Yes. Our 3D building designer allows you to place garage doors on any wall, including the long side walls. Side-entry garages are popular on narrow lots where the driveway runs parallel to the structure, or when you want the front wall facing the street without a visible garage door opening.

Yes. Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment with a deposit now and balance after install at zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing with competitive rates from $89/mo over 12 to 72 months and a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) as low as $49/mo with no credit check, first month as down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. View all financing options

Choose from 12 standard colors at no additional charge: Barn Red, Beige, Black, Brown, Burgundy, Burnished Slate, Clay, Galvalume, Green, Pewter Gray, Quaker Gray, Rawhide Tan, Royal Blue, Sandstone, Slate Blue, and White. You can select separate colors for the roof, walls, trim, and wainscot through the 3D designer. Color choices do not affect price or lead time.

Permit requirements vary by county and city. Contact your local building department before ordering to confirm setback requirements, maximum building height, and any engineering certification needs. Once plans are submitted, your deposit is non-refundable if a permit is denied for reasons other than the engineered plans themselves.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Garage Sizes, Types and Dimensions Guide

Enclosed metal garage dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Standard garages range from 12 to 24 feet wide, with lengths from 21 to 100 feet in standard increments. Triple-wide garages span 26 to 30 feet for three-car or commercial layouts. Leg height starts at 6 feet and goes up to 30 feet for the tallest structures, with 10 and 12-foot clearance being the most common choices for residential enclosed garages.

Standard garages (20 to 24 feet wide, 20 to 40 feet long) are the most popular category and accommodate two vehicles with room for side storage, a workbench, or wall-mounted tool systems. A 20x30 garage provides roughly 600 square feet of enclosed space, while a 24x40 gives you 960 square feet of fully protected interior. Triple-wide garages (26 to 30 feet wide) are built for three or more vehicles, commercial fleet parking, or combined vehicle storage and workshop layouts.

Garage with lean-to configurations combine an enclosed garage with an attached open-sided or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. This design gives you the security of a locked enclosed garage for your primary vehicles while providing additional covered parking, equipment shelter, or a shaded outdoor workspace at a fraction of the cost of full enclosure.

How Much Does a Metal Garage Cost in 2026?

Metal garage prices in 2026 start at $9,775 for a standard 30x30x10 enclosed garage and go up to $21,000 or more for large triple-wide structures with lean-tos. All tubular steel garage prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation by a certified crew.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider garages carry heavier framing), Length (additional bays add cost proportionally), Leg Height (taller structures need reinforced legs), Roof Style (vertical adds approximately 15% over regular), Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds roughly 12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty), and Lean-To Additions (each lean-to adds roughly 20 to 30 percent to the base price depending on dimensions).

Prices also vary by state due to regional manufacturing and delivery logistics. Coastal and mountain states with higher certification requirements (140 MPH wind, 25 PSF snow load) carry higher base prices. Contact us with your ZIP code for an exact quote that reflects your specific location.

Choosing the Right Metal Garage for Your Property

Selecting the right enclosed steel garage depends on what you plan to store, how much workspace you need, and the physical constraints of your building site. A one-car garage (12 to 18 feet wide) works for a single vehicle, motorcycle collection, or dedicated workshop. A two-car garage (20 to 24 feet wide) is the most versatile option for residential properties, fitting two standard vehicles with room for seasonal storage. A three-car or triple-wide garage (26 to 30 feet wide) serves families with multiple vehicles, commercial operators storing fleet vehicles, or hobbyists who need a large workshop alongside vehicle bays.

Consider your door placement carefully. Front-entry garages with the door on the short wall are standard, but side-entry configurations are ideal for narrow lots, L-shaped driveways, or properties where you want the long wall to face the street for a cleaner appearance. Our 3D designer lets you place doors, windows and lean-tos exactly where you need them before ordering.

Metal Garage Installation: What to Expect

After placing your order and submitting your deposit, the manufacturer assigns a professional installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size, certification requirements, and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level concrete slab (strongly recommended for enclosed garages), clear vehicle access for the delivery truck, and any permits posted or available. The crew typically completes a standard 20x30 or 24x40 garage in one full day. Triple-wide garages and structures with lean-tos may take up to two days.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your garage is installed and you confirm satisfaction. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Need something different? Explore our full range: open Metal Barns from $1,195 for basic vehicle coverage, metal barns for agricultural storage and equestrian use, tall clearance RV covers for motorhomes and fifth-wheels, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and commercial steel buildings for warehouses, retail and industrial applications. Every category includes factory-direct pricing and professional installation on tubular steel orders.

READY TO SECURE YOUR VEHICLES WITH A METAL GARAGE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who trust our durable metal garages. Enjoy factory-direct pricing with free delivery and professional installation on all tubular steel buildings.

View Cart